Digital Workstation اﻟﻌرﺑﯾﺔ اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ ﺟﮭﺎز رﻗﻣﻲ اﯾﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﮐﺎر دﯾﺟﯾﺗﺎل ﻛﺗﯾّب اﻟﻣﺎﻟك دﻓﺗرﭼﮫ راھﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻟﮏ Lorem ipsum Yamaha Global Site https://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads https://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Group © 2020 Yamaha Corporation Published 12/2020 LBMA*.
ﯾﻣﻛن اﻟﻌﺛور ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗم اﻟطراز ،واﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ،وﻣﺗطﻠﺑﺎت اﻟطﺎﻗﺔ ،وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟك ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟوﺣﺔ اﻻﺳم اﻟﻣوﺟودة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺟزء اﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣن اﻟوﺣدة أو ﺑﺎﻟﻘرب ﻣﻧﮭﺎ .ﯾﺟب ﻋﻠﯾك ﺗدوﯾن ھذا اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻣﺗوﻓرة أدﻧﺎه واﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎظ ﺑﮭذا اﻟدﻟﯾل ﻛﺳﺟل داﺋم ﻟﻌﻣﻠﯾﺔ اﻟﺷراء ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋدة ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣدﯾد اﻟﮭوﯾﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺳرﻗﺔ. رﻗم اﻟطراز اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )(bottom_ar_01 ﺷﻣﺎره ﻣدل ،ﺷﻣﺎره ﺳ﷼ ،ﺿرورﯾﺎت ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺗﻐذﯾﮫ و ﻣوارد دﯾﮕر را ﻣﯽﺗوان روی ﺑرﭼﺳب ﻧﺎم دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﯾﺎ ﻧزدﯾﮏ آن ﮐﮫ در زﯾر دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﻗرار دارد ﻣﺷﺎھده ﮐرد .
psra5000_om.
ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺁﻳﻧﺩﻩ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ AC ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﺍﺧﻁﺎﺭ • ﺍﻳﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ACﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺑﺭﻗﯽ Yamahaﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻳﭻ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺗﻣﺎﻥ .ﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ،ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ACﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ.
احتياط ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭﺍﻥ ،ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻳﯽ ﻫﺎ ،ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ: ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺑﺭﻕ/ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ AC ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ • ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﭼﻧﺩﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻻً ﮔﺭﻡ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ PSR-A5000ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﺁﻭﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺗﻥ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻧﻭﺍﺯﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺷﺭﻗﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﺷﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺷﻌﻔﯽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡﺑﺧﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﺭ ﻣﯽﺍﻧﮕﻳﺯﺩ—ﺑﺎ ﺑﺭﺧﻭﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻓﻭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ. ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﻭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ PSR-A5000ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻪﺍی ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺁﮐﻭﺳﺗﻳﮏ ﺷﺭﻗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻳﻝ Nay ،Oudﻭ Qanoonﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺫﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﻪ ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺕﻫﺎی ﭘﺭﺗﺎﻣﻧﺗﻭی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﺭﻥ ،ﺍﻧﻌﻁﺎﻑﭘﺫﻳﺭی ﻭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻓﻭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﺭﺩ.
ﻓﺭﻣﺕﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺳﺎﺯ ) GM (General MIDIﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﺭﻣﺕﻫﺎی ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺁﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ GM System Level 2 .ﻳﮏ ﻣﺷﺧﺻﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ GMﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺑﻭﺩ ﻣﯽﺑﺧﺷﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﭼﻧﺩﺁﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻬﺗﺭ ،ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺍی ﻗﻭیﺗﺭ ،ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺍﻓﮑﺕ ﻳﮑﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ.
ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ ﺁﻣﻭﺯﺷﯽ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻟﮏ )ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ( ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ PSR-A5000ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ. ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻥ )ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ( ) Reference Manualﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺭﺟﻊ( )ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻳﺳﯽ ،ﻓﺭﺍﻧﺳﻭی ،ﺁﻟﻣﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺗﺭﮐﯽ ،ﻋﺭﺑﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕﻫﺎی ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﺭﺟﻳﻧﺎﻝ ،ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻭ ) Multi Padsﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ.
ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ —PSR-A5000ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﺟﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺟﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻁﻳﻑ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺩﻩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﻭﺭی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺩﺳﺕ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺩ ،ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻣﻧﺩ ﮐﻣﮏ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ،ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ -ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻣﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ -ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. رک * :ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻟﮏ ) PSR-A5000ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ( .ﻧﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻓﺻﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻧﺩ .
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ PSR-A5000ﺑﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯ رک ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ )ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ،ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ ،ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ( ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ —PSR-A5000ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﺟﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ )*( ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ) Expansion Packsﺑﺳﺗﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ( ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ) Yamahaﮐﻪ " "Premium Packsﻧﻳﺯ ﻧﺎﻣﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ( ﻭﺏﺳﺎﻳﺕ Yamaha MusicSoft https://www.yamahamusicsoft.
ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ٣ ...................................................................................................................................................................... ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ۵ ............................................................................................................................................................ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ۶ ..................................................................................................
ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ۴ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ—ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕﻫﺎی ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ۶٨... ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﭘﺧﺷﺂﻫﻧﮓ ۶٨ ........................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ) Song Position Markersﻣﺎﺭﮐﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( )ﻓﻘﻁ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی ٧١ ...................................................................................................................................................
ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭک ﺑﻬﺗﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻭ ﭘﺗﺎﻧﺳﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ. ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ—ﺭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭ ﻫﻣﻧﻭﺍﺯی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ PSR-A5000ﺗﻧﻭﻋﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻭﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﻣﻧﻭﺍﺯی ﻭ ﺭﻳﺗﻣﻳﮏ )ﺑﺎ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ") "Stylesﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ(( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ژﺍﻧﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻋﺭﺑﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﭘﺎپ ،ﺟﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭی ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .
ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ—ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ،ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻧﺞ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ Scale Tune Memory Bankﻣﺟﺯﺍ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ.
ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ۲۴ ۲۵ ۲۶ ۳۲ ۳۱ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ].............. [JOYSTICK HOLDﺻﻔﺣﻪ ۶٠ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺷﺵ ﺻﺩﺍ ،ﻣﺩﻭﻻﺳﻳﻭﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] ........................................ [MENUﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ٢٧ ،٢٢ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Menuﻣﻧﻭ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﻣﺎ ﻓﺭﺍﻫﻡ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. ۱۶ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ]STYLE TEMPO LOCK/ .....
ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎ ۶ ۴ ۵ ۱۴ ۱۶ ۱۵ [ ] ﮐﻠﻳﺩ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ/ﺭﻭﺷﻥ( ....................................ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ١٨ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ................................................ TEMPOﺻﻔﺣﻪ ۴٠ ﺗﻣﭘﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. ﭘﻳﭻ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ]........................
ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ............ REGISTRATION MEMORYﺻﻔﺣﻪ ٨٧ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ......... ONE TOUCH SETTINGﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ۵٢ ،۴١ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ........ MULTI PAD CONTROLﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ۶٢ ،۵١ ﻳﮏ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺕ Multi Padﺭﻳﺗﻣﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻠﻭﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. ۳۲ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ............................... UPPER OCTAVEﺻﻔﺣﻪ ۵٣ ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﮐﺗﺎﻭ ﺷﻳﻔﺕ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ.
ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎ ۵ ۴ ﺳﻭﮐﺕ ....................................................... DC INﺻﻔﺣﻪ ١٨ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ. ﺳﻭﮐﺕﻫﺎی ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺏ )،[1 (L/L+R)] (AUX ] ............................................................ [(R) 2ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ١٠٣ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﻭﮐﺕﻫﺎ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ) Line Outﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻁ( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽﻫﺎی SUB 1-2ﻳﺎ AUXﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻧﺩ. ﺳﻭﮐﺕﻫﺎی ......
ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ACﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ۳ ۲ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ AC ﭘﺭﻳﺯ AC ۱ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺳﻭﮐﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی DC )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (١٧ ﺷﮑﻝ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. اﺧطﺎر ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ACﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (١١٧ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ACﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ. اﺣﺗﯾﺎط ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ،ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ACﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .
ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Auto Power Offﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﻏﻳﺭﺿﺭﻭﺭی ﺑﺭﻕ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ Auto Power Off )ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﮕﺫﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ٣٠ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﭼﺭﺍﻍﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﺟﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﭼﺭﺍﻍﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ١ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ) (Utilityﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ١ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .(١٩ ٢ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ") "Touch Screen/Displayﺻﻔﺣﻪ/ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] [Touch Screen/Displayﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٣ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ) Screenﺻﻔﺣﻪ( ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺯﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺳﺎﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ LCDﻭ ﭼﺭﺍﻍﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﻣﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭک ﺑﺻﺭی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺟﺎﺭی ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺳﺎﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭼﺭﺍﻍﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺭﺍﻍﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕﻫﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ/ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﺭ، ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻧﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ،ﺑﻪ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻫﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Menuﻣﻧﻭ( ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻳﮑﻥﻫﺎ ،ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ) Song Scoreﺍﺳﮑﻭﺭ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﻭVolume Balance )ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺱ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ( ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺻﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ) .ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (٢٧ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Mic Settingﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ( ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﺩﺍی ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻳﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .
ﺳﺎﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Song Playbackﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺕ )ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ .(۶٨ ،۶۴ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Song Recording )ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .(٨۵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Style Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺳﺑﮏ( ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ) File Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ( )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (٢۶ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Mixerﻣﻳﮑﺳﺭ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ،ﭘﻳﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻭ ) EQﺻﻔﺣﻪ .
ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻏﻠﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ،ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ) Home :ﺧﺎﻧﻪ() File Selection ،ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ( ﻭ ) Menuﻣﻧﻭ( .ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Homeﺧﺎﻧﻪ( ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ .ﻭﺍژﻩ "ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) File Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ(" ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻥ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻁﻼﻕ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Menuﻣﻧﻭ( ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [MENUﻓﺭﺍ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ.
ﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ) Other Informationﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ( ۵ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ) Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ،ﺑﺧﺵ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ۶ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ) Shortcutﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ( ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺁﻳﮑﻥﻫﺎی ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﻟﻣﺱ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﮑﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .
) File Selection Displayﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ( ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺍ ،ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ،ﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻭﺍ ،ﺳﺑﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Homeﺧﺎﻧﻪ( ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی VOICEﻳﺎ STYLEﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ،ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺁﻭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Voice Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺍ( ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﺳﺎﺧﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ.
ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Menuﻣﻧﻭ( ﺍﻳﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [MENUﻓﺭﺍ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺁﻳﮑﻥﻫﺎ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ] [Menu 1ﻳﺎ ][Menu 2 ﻳﺎ ﭼﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [MENUﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺟﻬﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ،ﺑﻪ "ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ" )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (١٠٩ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﺩﻥ ﭘﻳﭻ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [INC]/[DECﮐﺎﻫﺵ/ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ( ﺗوﺟﮫ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺗﻳﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺧﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﭻ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ENTERﻭ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ][DEC]/[INC ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ،ﭘﻳﭻ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎ ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ،ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﭻ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ] [INC]/[DECﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺷﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ) Direct Access -ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ( ﺑﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ،ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ً ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ -ﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Direct Accessﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ( ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ "ﻧﻣﻭﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ١١١ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [DIRECT ACCESSﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻳﮏ ﭘﻳﻐﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ.
ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻳﻝ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ )ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ "ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ("Userﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺷﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﺳﺎﻥﺗﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ،ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ،ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) File Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ( ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ.
۶ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] [OKﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ) Character Entryﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﻳﺳﻪ( ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺑﺎ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﭘﻭﺷﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ،ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻣﺭﺗﺏ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺗﺭ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ.
۴ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ/ﭘﻭﺷﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ/ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﻫﺎﻳﻼﻳﺕ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ( .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﻐﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ،ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍ ً ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [Select Allﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻫﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﻐﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] [All Offﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ۵ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] [Copyﻳﺎ ] [Moveﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﻳﺳﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﻳﺳﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ/ﭘﻭﺷﻪﻫﺎی ﺷﻣﺎ ،ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﻳﺳﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ۳ ،۲ ۱ ١ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻧﻭﻳﺳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ]) [Symbolﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ] ([abcﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺭﻭﻑ )ﻭ ﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩ( ﻻﺗﻳﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ. )) (Shiftﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ( ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ )) Panel Lockﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ(( ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ،ﺣﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ،ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺭﺥ ﻧﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. ١ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Panel Lockﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ][Panel Lock] [MENU ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩی ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﻳﻥ ﮐﺩ ﻓﺭﺍ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ.
ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺟﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ—ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ PSR-A5000 ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ )) Auto Accompanimentﻫﻣﻧﻭﺍﺯی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ(( ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺑﻬﺑﻧﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺳﺑﮏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ )ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ( ...ﺹ۴١ . ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ )Harmony/Arpeggio ،Keyboard Parts ﻳﺎ (Multi Padsﺑﺭﺍی ﺳﺑﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ. ...ﺹ٣٨ . ﻳﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ...ﺹ۴٢ . )ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ( ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ /Harmony ) Arpeggioﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ/ ﺁﺭﭘژ( ...ﺹ۴٨ .
...ﺹ٧۶ . ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺟﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ—ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ PSR-A5000 ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎ ... ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ :ﺹ۵۶ . ﺹ۵۴ . ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ Multi Pads )ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩﻫﺎ( ...ﺹ۵١ . ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎ ...ﺹ۵۴ . ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ ...ﺹ٧۶ . ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ :ﺹ۶٨ . ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ) Playlistﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ...ﺹ٩١ .
١ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ—ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﻬﺑﻭﺩ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻭﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ )ﺭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭ ﻫﻣﻧﻭﺍﺯی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻉ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ )ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ( ،ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮔﺭﻭﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .
۴ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﻡ ،ﺳﺑﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺗﺣﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] STYLE CONTROL ﺧﻭﺩ ﺑﻧﻭﺍﺯﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] STYLE CONTROL ﻧﮑﺗﮫ [ ) (SYNC STARTﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﭼپ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ۵۶ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. [ ) (START/STOPﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ) Styleﺳﺑﮏ( ﻧﻭﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ) Style Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺳﺑﮏ( ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ .
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﻣﭘﻭ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی [-] TEMPOﻭ ] [+ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﭘﻭی ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ ،ﺳﺑﮏ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDIﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺗﻣﭘﻭی ﺳﺑﮏ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDIﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [RESET/TAP TEMPOﻧﻳﺯ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی [+]/[-] TEMPO ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﯽﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﭘﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ Time Stretch )ﮐﺷﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ٧٠ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪ [-] TEMPOﻳﺎ ] [+ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﭘﻭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ .
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺑﻬﺑﻧﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺳﺑﮏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ )ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ( ... ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳژﻳﮕﯽ ﻧﻳﺭﻭﻣﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺻﯽ )ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ،ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎ ،ﻏﻳﺭﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺳﺑﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻭﻧﯽ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﺑﻼ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﻭﺍی ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ )ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ 2–1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (٣٨ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ RIGHT 2 ،RIGHT 1 ،LEFT :ﻭ RIGHT 3ﻭ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻭﺍی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی PART ON/OFFﺗﺭﮐﻳﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻓﺕﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﮑﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﺭﮐﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺁﻭﺍی ﺑﺧﺵ )LEFT (Left Hold ﺑﺎ ﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] PART ON/OFF [LEFT HOLDﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺳﻣﺕ LEFTﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ONﺍﺳﺕ ،ﺁﻭﺍی ﺳﻣﺕ LEFTﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﺣﺗﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎی ﻏﻳﺭ-ﻣﺣﻭ ﺷﻭﻧﺩﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﺳﻳﻣﯽ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﮑﻪ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﻭ ﺷﻭﻧﺩﻩ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﭘﻳﺎﻧﻭ ﺁﻫﺳﺗﻪﺗﺭ ﻣﺣﻭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﭘﺩﺍﻝ ﺳﺎﺳﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ( .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺯﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﺩﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻣﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ.
Split Point )ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ( )(Left + Style Split Point )ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ( )،Left ،Style (Right 3 ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ) (Styleﻭ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ) (Leftﺭﺍ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺕ ﻳﮑﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ،ﻗﺳﻣﺕ Chord ﻭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺑﺧﺵ LEFTﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ﻳﮑﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻧﺩ. ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ][Style + Left ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻁ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﭼپ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ/ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ][Split & Fingering] [MENU ٢ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ—ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی Chord Detection ) Areaﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ( ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ " "Upperﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ PART SELECTﻣﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺍ )ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ( ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ٢ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Voice Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺍ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Homeﺧﺎﻧﻪ( )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (٢۴ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Voice Part Setup ﻧﻳﺯ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏﺳﺎﻳﺕ(. ﺁﻭﺍی ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ VOICEﻧﻳﺯ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻋﯽ ) Voiceﺁﻭﺍ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﻠﻭﺕ ﺍﺭگ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﻧﻭﻟﻭژی ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﺳﺎﺯی ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻓﺳﺎﻧﻪﺍی ﺍﺭگﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﻧﺗﺎژ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺭگ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ﺳﻧﺗﯽ ،ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎی ﻓﻭﺗﻳﺞ ﻓﻠﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺁﻭﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺁﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭ ﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ. ١ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Voice Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺍ() Organ Flutes Voice ،ﺁﻭﺍی ﻓﻠﻭﺕ ﺍﺭگ( ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ) Keyboard Harmony/Arpeggioﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ/ﺁﺭﭘژ( ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺭﭘژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻬﺑﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ) (RIGHT 1–3ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ )ﺩﻭﺋﺕ ،ﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ(، ﺍﮐﻭ ،ﺗﺭﻣﻭﻟﻭ ﻭ ﺗﺭﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﺕﻫﺎی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ .ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﺭﭘژ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﺕﻫﺎی ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ،ﺁﺭﭘژ )ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﮑﺳﺗﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ACMPﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻣﺕ LEFTﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ: ) Split Pointﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ( )(Left ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی RIGHT 1–3 ﺑﺧﺵ LEFTﻭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﮑﺕ ) Harmonyﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ( • ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ACMPﻭ ﺳﻣﺕ LEFTﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ: ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ )(Left ١ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ—ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی RIGHT 1–3 ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ )(Style ﺑﺧﺵ LEFT ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻭ ﺍﻓﮑﺕ ) Harmonyﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ( ) Multi Assignﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﭼﻧﺩﮔﺎﻧﻪ( ﺍﻓﮑﺕ Multi Assignﺑﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺕﻫﺎی ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍ
۵ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺕ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻧﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺁﺭﭘژ. ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺕ ﺁﺭﭘژی ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺕﻫﺎی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻓﮑﺕ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [HARMONY/ARPEGGIOﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ۵٠ PSR-A5000ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻟﮏ ﻧﮑﺗﮫ • ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ Arpeggio Quan- ،tizeﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﺭﭘژ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ/ﺳﺑﮏ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﺭﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺟﺯﺋﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺑﻧﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: ] [Voice Setting] [MENU ].
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ) Multi Padsﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩﻫﺎ( ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩﻫﺎ ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECTﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Multi Pad ) Bank Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ( ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ٢ ) Multi Pad Bankﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٣ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻳﻝ ،ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ)ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺗﺣﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ Multi Pad ) Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ) Homeﺧﺎﻧﻪ( ﻧﻳﺯ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .
ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺳﭘﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ) One Touch Settingﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ( ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺧﻭﺩ )ﻋﻣﺩﺗﺎ ً ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ ) (OTSﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺑﺳﭘﺎﺭﻳﺩ .ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ Userﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺳﭘﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﮏﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٢ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎ.
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻳﻡﭘﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎ )ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ](TRANSPOSE [-]/[+ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ] TRANSPOSE [-]/[+ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ )ﺻﺩﺍی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ،ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDI ﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﮔﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻧﻳﻡﭘﺭﺩﻩﺍی )ﺍﺯ -12ﻭ (12ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻧﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻭﺭی ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ،0ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ] [+ﻭ ] [-ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻳﺩ ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭ Pitch ) Shiftﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ٧٠ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﮔﺭﺩﺍﻥ ،LIVE CONTROLﺩﺳﺗﻪ ،LIVE CONTROLﺩﮐﻣﻪ ]STYLE TEMPO LOCK/ [ASSIGNABLEﻳﺎ ﺳﻭﺋﻳﭻﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮔﻭﻳﺎ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ .ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ/ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺟﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ.
ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ] ASSIGNABLE [A]–[Fﻭ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [STYLE TEMPO LOCK/ASSIGNABLEﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ. ١ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Editﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ( [Assignable] [MENU] ،ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ۲ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ—ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ٢ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ") "Assignable Buttonsﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ( ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ )ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ(. ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻭی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ٣ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
٢ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ—ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕﻫﺎی ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺗﮑﯽ )ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕﻫﺎی ﻗﺑﻝ( ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ ،ﺍﮐﻧﻭﻥ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻋﻣﺩﺗﺎ ً ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ :ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎی ﮔﻭﻳﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ. ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ][START/STOP ﭘﺧﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﭘﺧﺵ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ.
) Fade In/Outﺗﻭﻗﻑ/ﭘﺧﺵ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﯽ( ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Fade In/Outﺗﻭﻗﻑ/ﭘﺧﺵ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﯽ( ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ/ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ،ﭘﺧﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﯽ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ/ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭ ﭘﺩﺍﻝﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ،ﺑﻪ "ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ" )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (۵۴ﻭ "ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ) "ASSIGNABLEﺻﻔﺣﻪ (٩۵ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ][BREAK ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻳﺗﻡ ﻫﻣﻧﻭﺍﺯی ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [BREAKﺭﺍ ﺣﻳﻥ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻭی ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻳﮏ-ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺩ ،ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ Main )ﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﭼﺭﺍﻍﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺳﻣﺕ )(ENDING ،BREAK ،MAIN VARIATION ،INTRO • ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺟﯽ :ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺍﮐﻧﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. • ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺟﯽ )ﭼﺷﻣﮏﺯﻥ( :ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ.
٣ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ [ON/OFF] CHORD LOOPERﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍی ﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ACMPﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﻣﯽﺯﻧﺩ ،ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ON/OFFﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺟﯽ ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﻣﯽﺯﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍی ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺩی ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ON/OFFﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺟﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ٢ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ.
ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﭘﻳﺵﻓﺭﺽ ،ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺕﻫﺎی ﻋﻣﻭﺩی ) (Yﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ) (Xﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻻﺳﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ .ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. +Y -X +X -Y ) X: Pitch Bend ﮐﺷﺵ ﺻﺩﺍ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ،ﺯﻳﺭﻭﺑﻣﯽﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ( ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ )ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ( ﻣﯽﮐﺷﺩ .
ﭘﺧﺵ ﻭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ) Super Articulationﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭ ﻗﻭی( ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺕ ") "articulationﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭ ﻗﻭی( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻻً ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺩﺍﻭﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﺕﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻻً ﺩﺭ ﺗﮑﻧﻳﮏﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﮐﺎﺗﻭ ،ﻟﮕﺎﺗﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻠﺭ ﻧﻣﻭﺩ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻧﺩ. ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭ ﻗﻭی )ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی (S.Artﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻧﺩ ﻅﺭﺍﻓﺕﻫﺎی ﺩﻗﻳﻖ ،ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻭ ﮔﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﻧﻭﺍﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻭﺍ ) (S.
ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩﻫﺎ ١ ﻫﺭﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ] MULTI PAD CONTROL [1]–[4ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﻣﭘﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽﻳﺎﺑﺩ .ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﺑﻧﻭﺍﺯﻳﺩ. ٢ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﭘﺧﺵ ﭘﻭﻟﺗﯽ ﭘﺩ)ﻫﺎ( ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [STOPﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﭘﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [STOPﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺩ)ﻫﺎﻳﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ • ﺩﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Synchro Startﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺳﻳﻧﮑﺭﻭی( ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻧﻳﺯ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ [SELECT] MULTI PAD CONTROLﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪﺍﻳﺩ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ] [4]–[1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺟﯽ ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﻣﯽﺯﻧﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﻐﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ، ﻫﻣﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [STOPﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻫﻣﻪ ﭘﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻐﻭ ﺷﻭﺩ.
٣ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ—ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﭼﮕﻭﻧﻪ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ) Song selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺻﻝ ١ﺫﮐﺭ ﺷﺩ ،ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮔﺭﻭﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ Registration ) Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .
ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﭘﻳﺵﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ )ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی (MIDI • ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ )ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ٨۵ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ( • ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ :ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی MIDIﺩﺭ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ،(Standard MIDI File) SMFﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ WAVﻳﺎ .MP3 .........WAVﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﻧﻣﻭﻧﻪ ۴۴٫١ﮐﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ ١۶ ،ﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ،ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ .........
ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ )ﺣﺎﻟﺕ (Song Player ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [PLAYERﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Song Playbackﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ Song Playerﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. ۲ ٢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ MIDIﻳﺎ Audioﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Song Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ) MIDIﻳﺎ (Audioﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ٣ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ )ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ) Song Listﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ( ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [SONGﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Song Playbackﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ) Song Listﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ( ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. ۲ ٢ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ) Song Listﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ) Song Listﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ٣ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ—ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ) (Newﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﻳﮏ Song Listﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
۴ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ— ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕﻫﺎی ﺣﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ :ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ،ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺍﺳﮑﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ. ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﭘﺧﺵﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Song Playbackﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ SONG ] [PLAYERﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ،ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﺭﺩ .
ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ) Song Playback Positionﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( )ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻭی ) Song Positionﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ(( ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ ) (PREVﻳﺎ ] [ ) (NEXTﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ،ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﭻ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﻘﺏ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ/ﺟﻠﻭ ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺗﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﺧﺗﺹ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ) Vocal Cancel ﻟﻐﻭ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﻩ( ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺑﮏ ") "karaokeﮐﺎﺭﺍﺋﻭﮐﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻣﻠﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﻧﻭﺍﺯﻳﺩ ،ﺯﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ،ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻻً ﺩﺭ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﻳﺭﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ) Song Position Markersﻣﺎﺭﮐﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( )ﻓﻘﻁ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎی (MIDI ﻣﺎﺭﮐﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ) (SP4–SP1ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDIﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDIﭘﻳﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ -ﻭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺍﻣﻭﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ "ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯ" ﻭ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺭﮐﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ٢ ﻣﺎﺭﮐﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺭﮐﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ،ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺫﮐﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺎﺭﮐﺭﻫﺎی ] [1ﻭ ] [2ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻳﻡ. ١ ٢ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ] ،[1ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ) (Play/Pauseﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. )) (Loopﺣﻠﻘﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ] [2ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍ ً ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ] [1ﺑﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺭﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ.
ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺍﺳﮑﻭﺭ ،ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻧﯽ ﺣﻳﻥ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﮐﺗﺎﺑﭼﻪ ﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ) (Scoreﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDI ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﺗﺎﺑﭼﻪ ﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺯﻳﮏ )ﺍﺳﮑﻭﺭ( ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDIﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺗﺎﺑﭼﻪ ﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺯﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺗﻣﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDIﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .(۶۶ ٢ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Scoreﺍﺳﮑﻭﺭ( ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ) Song Playbackﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ،ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .(۶۶ ٢ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Lyricsﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻧﻪﻫﺎ( ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ) Song Playbackﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ) (Lyricsﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ،ﻣﺗﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ] [ﻳﺎ ] [ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Talkﺻﺣﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ( ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Talkﺻﺣﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ( ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﺣﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺿﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺿﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎی ﭘژﻭﺍک ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻣﺕ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ١ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Mic Settingﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ][Mic Setting] [MENU ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
۵ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ/ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ Temperament )ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ( )) (Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺣﻭی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﻫﻣﺎﻫﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻣﺳﻳﺭ ] [Scale Tune] [MENUﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﺭﺩ. ﺳﺎﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ) Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻔﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ) Main Scaleﮔﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﻭ ) Sub Scaleﮔﺎﻡ ﻓﺭﻋﯽ(. ﮔﺎﻡ :Main ﮔﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .
ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﭘﻳﺵﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ )) (Main Scaleﮔﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮔﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻭکﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﯽ ﻳﺎ ژﺍﻧﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ۱ ۲ ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺎﻡ Mainﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ١ ﻧﻭﻉ ﮔﺎﻡ )ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ( ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﭘﺭﻣﺎﻥ )) (Sub Scaleﮔﺎﻡ ﻓﺭﻋﯽ( ﺑﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺎﻡ Subﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮔﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺑﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺎﻡ Mainﺍﻭﻟﻭﻳﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻓﺭﻋﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ )ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ،ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ") "Subﻓﺭﻋﯽ( ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ( ١ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ،ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻓﺭﻋﯽ ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ][Sub ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺳﭘﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺎﻡ Sub ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺎﻡ Subﮐﻪ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ )ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی SCALE TUNE SETTINGﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (Scale Tuneﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی SCALE TUNE MEMORYﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ١ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ) Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی SCALE TUNE SETTINGﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Scale Tuneﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ) Scale Tune Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ Bank ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﺎﻡ Subﺑﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺳﭘﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ] SCALE TUNE MEMORY [1]–[5ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ Scale Tune Memory ) Bankﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ( ﻣﺟﺯﺍ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ. ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ٠۴ ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ٠٣ ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ٠٢ ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ٠١ ١ ٢ ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﺎﻡ Subﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ] SCALE TUNE MEMORY [1]–[5ﺑﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺳﭘﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ،Bankﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ) (Saveﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
۶ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ— ) Mixerﻣﻳﮑﺳﺭ( ﻣﻳﮑﺳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﯽ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺟﻧﺑﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ/ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻁﻧﻳﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ )ﭘﻥ( ﻫﺭ ﺁﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺱ ﺑﻬﻳﻧﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎ ﭼﮕﻭﻧﻪ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﻭﻳﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ) Mixerﻣﻳﮑﺳﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .
٣ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ،ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ) Filterﻓﻳﻠﺗﺭ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﺯﻭﻧﺎﻧﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻣﻭﻧﻪﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی )ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺻﺩﺍ(. EQ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭی ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻁﻧﻳﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ. ) Effectﺍﻓﮑﺕ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻓﮑﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻋﻣﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ. Chorus/Reverb )ﮐﺭ/ﭘژﻭﺍک( ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻓﮑﺕ ﮐﺭ/ﭘژﻭﺍک ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻋﻣﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ. ) Pan/Volumeﭘﻳﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ/ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﭘﻳﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ.
ﺭﻭﺷﻥ/ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDI ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﻳﺎﺳﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺱ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDIﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ/ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎی ﺳﺑﮏ ﻫﺭ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺣﺎﻭی ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ. • :Rhythm 1/2ﺍﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻭﻫﺎی ﺭﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﭘﺭﮐﺎﺷﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ. • :Bassﺑﺧﺵ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. • :Chord 1/2ﺍﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﭘﻳﺵ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻳﺗﻣﻳﮏ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ،ﮐﻪ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ ً ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ﮔﻳﺗﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻳﺎﻧﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩ.
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺁﻭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ MIDI ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻭﺍی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Mixerﻣﻳﮑﺳﺭ( ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ١ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Mixerﻣﻳﮑﺳﺭ( ،ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ] [Styleﻳﺎ ] [Songﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٢ ﺁﻳﮑﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺯﻳﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Voice Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺍ( ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻭﺍی ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺁﻭﺍ ٣ ٨۴ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ،ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺳﺑﮏ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ )ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ۵ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (٨٢ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ.
٧ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺍﺟﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ :ﺿﺑﻁ MIDIﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﺩﺍ .ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ،ﺿﺑﻁ MIDIﻧﻳﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ: ) Quick Recordingﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻭﺭی( ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺕﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ) Multi Recordingﺿﺑﻁ ﭼﻧﺩﮔﺎﻧﻪ( ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺭ ﺗﺭﺍک ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺟﺩﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ،ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕﻫﺎی MIDI Quick Recordingﻭ Audio Quick Recordingﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﻡ.
٢ ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ،ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺑﮏ ،ﭘﺧﺵ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ]،[Play/Pause ﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٣ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ،ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [Stopﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ۴ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ] ،[Saveﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Song Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ .(٣١ ﺗوﺟﮫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩﺳﺎﺯی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩ.
٨ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ—Registration ) Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﻭ ) Playlistﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ) Registration Memory ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ )ﺛﺑﺕ( ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﺣﺕﺗﺭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ. ﻫﺷﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ Registration Memoryﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .
ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ Registration Memory )ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺧﻭﺩ ١ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ،ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ٢ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [MEMORYﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ REGISTRATION MEMORYﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ Registration Memoryﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ ،ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .
ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ) Bankﺑﺎﻧﮏ( ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺷﺕ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ) Single Registration Memory Bankﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺗﮑﯽ( ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ—) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﻭ ) Playlistﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی [+] REGIST BANKﻭ ] [-ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Registrationﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ) Bank Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ.
ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ Registration Memory Bank ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ،ﺳﺑﮏ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ] [8]–[1ﻳﮏ Registration Memory Bank )ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩﺍﻧﺩ ،ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Registration Memory Bank Selectionﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ Bank ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ. ٢ ) (Menuﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ] [Regist Bank Infoﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ) Regist Bank Informationﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻪ ﺑﺯﺭگ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Playlist ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ—) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﻭ ) Playlistﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ) Playlistﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕﻫﺎی ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺍﺟﺭﺍﻫﺎی ﺯﻧﺩﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻪ ﺑﺯﺭگ )ﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ (Registration Memory Bankﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ: ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] ،Add Record [Searchﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ Registration Memory Bankﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ، ﺑﻪ ) Reference Manualﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺭﺟﻊ( ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏﺳﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﻧﺗﺎﻳﺞ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ،ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] ،[Add to Playlistﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩ Playlistﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ. ٣ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ،ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩ Playlistﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [PLAYLISTﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﺭﺍ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ. ۲ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ—) Registration Memoryﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ( ﻭ ) Playlistﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ۴ ٢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ Playlistﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Playlist File Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ. ٣ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ Playlistﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ. ۴ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] [Loadﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [PLAYLISTﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﺭﺍ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ. ٢ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ٣ ١-٢ ٢-٢ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ١-٢ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﺩﻳﺩ ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ )) (Downﺑﺎﻻ/ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ )/(Up ) (Saveﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
٩ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﻬﻳﻧﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺭﺟﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺑﻬﻳﻧﻪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Homeﺧﺎﻧﻪ(، ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ASSIGNABLEﻭ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﺍﺳﺭی ،ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻳﻝ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ. ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Homeﺧﺎﻧﻪ( ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Homeﺧﺎﻧﻪ( ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﺍﺳﺭی )(Utility ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Utilityﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺩی( ﻁﻳﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﮐﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩﺳﺎﺯی ،ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﻳﺭﺩ. ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ١ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ )(Master EQ ،Master Compressor ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ) Master Compressorﮐﻣﭘﺭﺳﻭﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﻭ Master EQ settings )ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ EQﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [MIXER/EQﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Mixerﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ٢ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ") "Masterﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ۲ ۳ ٣ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺭﺩﻧﻅﺭ ،ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ) Expansion Packs-ﺑﺳﺗﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﻧﺻﺏ ) Expansion Packsﺑﺳﺗﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ( ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺁﻭﺍی ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ﻭ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ " "Expansionﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ) Userﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ) Userﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ( ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Style Selectionﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺳﺑﮏ( ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .
١٠ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥﮔﻳﺭی/ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ. ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﺳﺧﺕﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﺳﺧﺕﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ١ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ] [Utility] [MENUﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٢ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ] [Systemﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﺳﺧﺕﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ.
ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ Userﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ )ﺑﺟﺯ (Expansion Voices/Stylesﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﺯﺍ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ١ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝ ] [USB TO DEVICEﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥﮔﻳﺭی ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ—ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺭﺍﺑﻁﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ١٧–١۴ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. اﺣﺗﯾﺎط ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ،ﺑﺭﻕ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ،ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ، ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻫﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ) (٠ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺅﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺗﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﯽ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻫﻳﺩ.
٣ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻳﺗﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻭﮐﺕ ] [MIC/GUITAR INPUTﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ۴ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻳﺗﺎﺭ ١ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ،ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٢ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Mic Settingﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ][Mic Setting] [MENU ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [MIC SETTINGﻧﻳﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺳﻧﺟﺵ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ٣ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﮔﺭﺩﺍﻥ ] [GAINﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﮔﻳﺗﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ )ﺳﻭﮐﺕﻫﺎی (MAIN OUTPUT )ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ،ﺳﻭﮐﺕﻫﺎی ) SUB (AUX) OUTPUTﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻓﺭﻋﯽ )ﮐﻣﮑﯽ(( ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻳﺵﻫﺎی MAIN OUTPUTﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻗﻭی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻣﻭﻧﻭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻭﮐﺕ MAIN ] OUTPUT [L/L+Rﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﮔﻭﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭی ﺳﺎﺯ ﺻﺩﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭی ﺳﺎﺯ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﺭﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﺩﺍ ،ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ • ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﺩﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ. • ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺱ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Mixerﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ) .
ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﻭﺋﻳﭻﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﯽ/ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﯽ )ﺳﻭﮐﺕﻫﺎی (FOOT PEDAL ﺳﻭﺋﻳﭻﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﯽ FC4Aﻳﺎ FC5ﻭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﯽ ) FC7ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺟﺩﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻭﮐﺕﻫﺎی ﭘﺩﺍﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﺳﻭﺋﻳﭻ ﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﮫ ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ ﭘﺩﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎی ) USBﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝ ]([USB TO DEVICE ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ LANﺑﯽﺳﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝ ] [USB TO DEVICEﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ ) USBﺻﻔﺣﻪ (٣١ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻭ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ LANﺑﯽﺳﻳﻡ ) USBﺻﻔﺣﻪ (١٠٧ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ.
ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ،ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ) Formatﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ ،USBﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺭ ﭼﻳﺯ ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝ ] [USB TO DEVICEﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ. ١ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝ ] [USB TO DEVICEﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ٢ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ] [Storage] [Utility] [MENUﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝ ]([USB TO HOST ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﻣﻳﻧﺎﻝ ] [USB TO HOSTﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ MIDIﻣﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ،ﺑﻪ ﺑﺧﺵ "ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ" ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏﺳﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗوﺟﮫ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ USBﻧﻭﻉ ABﺑﺎ ﻁﻭﻝ ﮐﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ٣ﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﮐﺎﺑﻝﻫﺎی USB 3.0ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ.
ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩی ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺭ ﺁﻳﮑﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ) Menuﻣﻧﻭ( ﺭﺍ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ) Reference Manualﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺭﺟﻊ( ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏﺳﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻋﻼﻣﺕ " "ﺑﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻧﺎﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺭ ) Reference Manualﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺭﺟﻊ( ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩﺍﻧﺩ.
) Menuﻣﻧﻭ( ) Regist Sequenceﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺛﺑﺕ( ) Regist Freezeﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ( ) Tempoﺗﻣﭘﻭ( ) Metronomeﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ( ) Live Controlﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺯﻧﺩﻩ( ) Assignableﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ( ) Panel Lockﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ( ) Demoﺩﻣﻭ( ) Voice Editﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺁﻭﺍ( ) Style Creatorﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺑﮏ( ) Song Recordingﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ( ) M.
ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﻭﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ( ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ،[ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ )ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮔﺭﺩﺍﻥDIRECT ACCESS] ﺩﮐﻣﻪ .
- Display called up with the Direct Access Function Scale Tune - Scale Tune Memory Bank Edit Scale Tune Menu Scale Tune Memory Bank Selection (Scale Tune Memory Bank Selection) Menu - Joystick Live Control Menu - - Assignable Menu - - Split Point & Fingering - Setting Style Setting - - - - - - EQ Multi Pad Chorus/Reverb Mixer Pan/Volume Menu - Compressor EQ Change Behavior Setting Setting Style Setting Style Setting Split Point & Fingering Style Setting - - Regist Bank Edit
ﻋﻳﺏﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺻﺩﺍی ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻧﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺟﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺑﺭﻕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ " Auto Power Offﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ" ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﻡ ،ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺣﻪ (١٩ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻧﻭﻳﺯ ﺷﻧﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﻧﻭﻳﺯ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻧﻳﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ .
ﺳﺑﮏ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻧﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﺣﺗﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [START/STOPﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻳﻡ. ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ) Rhythmﺭﻳﺗﻡ( ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻫﻳﭻ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍی ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ACMPﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺩﺳﺕ ﭼپ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﻫﻣﻧﻭﺍﺭی ﺳﺑﮏ ﺑﻧﻭﺍﺯﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ. ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Auto Accompanimentﻫﻣﻧﻭﺍﺯی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ؛ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ] [ACMPﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی )ﮐﻼﻭﻳﻪﻫﺎی( ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ )ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ (۴۵ ،۴٣ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﻧﻭﺍﺯﻳﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ) Audio Recordingﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﺩﺍ( ،ﻳﮏ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺧﻁﺎ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USB ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﺭﺩ. ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭ ﻓﻠﺵ USBﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ] [Utility] [MENU ] [Storageﻓﺭﺍﺧﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ) .
ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ/ﻭﺯﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺭﺽ × ﻗﻁﺭ × ﻁﻭﻝ( ﻭﺯﻥ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﻥ ﭼﻧﺩﺁﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﻳﺵﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻓﮑﺕﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺑﺧﺵ ﮐﻳﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ ﭘﻳﺵﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﮐﻧﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﻟﻣﺱ )ﺗﺎچ ﺭﺳﭘﺎﻧﺱ( ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﮔﺭﺩﺍﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻥ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﺗﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ ﭘژﻭﺍک ) Chorusﮐﺭ( ﺍﻓ
ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺁﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﺳﺑﮏﻫﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﺩﻣﻭ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺗﻔﺭﻗﻪ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺭﻣﻭﻧﯽ ) Arpeggioﺁﺭﭘژ( ﺳﺎﺳﺗﻳﻥ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﻣﻭﻧﻭ/ﭘﻠﯽ Style Creator )ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺑﮏ( ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ OTS ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺍﺳﮑﻭﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺗﺭﻭﻧﻭﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻣﭘﻭ ﺗﺭﻧﺳﭘﻭﺯ ﮐﻭک ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﮐﺗﺎﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻧﻭﻉ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻓﺭﻋﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﻭک ﮔﺎﻡ Direct Acces
ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ) A-B Repeatﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ٧٠ ..................... (A-B ) Actionﺍﻗﺩﺍﻡ( )ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ( ٩٢ ...................... ) Arpeggioﺁﺭﭘژ( ۴٩ .................................. ٩۵ ،۵۵ ............................ ASSIGNABLE Audio Link Multi Pad )ﻣﻭﻟﺗﯽﭘﺩ ﭘﻳﻭﻧﺩ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ( ۵١ ........................... ٩ .................................... Audio Phraser ) Auto Power Offﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ١٩ ..... ١٠۴ ...........................................
ﺭ ﻝ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﭘﺎﻧﻝ )ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ( ٣۶ ،١۶ ................ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ٩ ،٧ ................... ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩ ٩٢ ،٨٧ ............................... Playlist ﻻﻳﻪ ۴٢ .................................................... ﻟﻐﻭ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ ۴٠ ............................................. ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ۶ ............................................. ﻟﻭﭘﺭ ﺁﮐﻭﺭﺩ۵٨ ............................................ ﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ١٩ ....................................................
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble 2. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data 6. to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
libpng This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. This code is released under the libpng license. libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000 through 1.6.
FreeType libss2 / libcomerr2 Portions of this software are copyright © 2016 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Copyright 1987, 1988 by the Student Information Processing Board of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology ICU COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright © 1991-2016 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
THE C++ WRAPPER FUNCTIONS Contributed by: Google Inc. Copyright (c) 2007-2012, Google Inc. All rights reserved. THE “BSD” LICENCE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Yamaha ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ،ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ .ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ FRANCE NORTH AMERICA Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A.
ﯾﻣﻛن اﻟﻌﺛور ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗم اﻟطراز ،واﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ،وﻣﺗطﻠﺑﺎت اﻟطﺎﻗﺔ ،وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟك ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟوﺣﺔ اﻻﺳم اﻟﻣوﺟودة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺟزء اﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣن اﻟوﺣدة أو ﺑﺎﻟﻘرب ﻣﻧﮭﺎ .ﯾﺟب ﻋﻠﯾك ﺗدوﯾن ھذا اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻣﺗوﻓرة أدﻧﺎه واﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎظ ﺑﮭذا اﻟدﻟﯾل ﻛﺳﺟل داﺋم ﻟﻌﻣﻠﯾﺔ اﻟﺷراء ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋدة ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣدﯾد اﻟﮭوﯾﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺳرﻗﺔ. رﻗم اﻟطراز اﻟرﻗم اﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )(bottom_ar_01 ﺷﻣﺎره ﻣدل ،ﺷﻣﺎره ﺳ﷼ ،ﺿرورﯾﺎت ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺗﻐذﯾﮫ و ﻣوارد دﯾﮕر را ﻣﯽﺗوان روی ﺑرﭼﺳب ﻧﺎم دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﯾﺎ ﻧزدﯾﮏ آن ﮐﮫ در زﯾر دﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﻗرار دارد ﻣﺷﺎھده ﮐرد .
Digital Workstation اﻟﻌرﺑﯾﺔ اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ ﺟﮭﺎز رﻗﻣﻲ اﯾﺳﺗﮕﺎه ﮐﺎر دﯾﺟﯾﺗﺎل ﻛﺗﯾّب اﻟﻣﺎﻟك دﻓﺗرﭼﮫ راھﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎرﺑری Yamaha Global Site https://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads https://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Group © 2020 Yamaha Corporation Published 12/2020 LBMA*.